1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2121–2160 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Charcoal steel garage service shop with SUV raised on a lift in the open bay

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay | Steel and Stud, From $24,300

12

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,700$24,300SAVE $3,400
or $506/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×603-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Three 32×60 roll-up doors line the 50-foot side; a walk-in door enters the bench.

You’re viewing:3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,300$27,700Save $3,400
or as low as $506/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$24,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 3x 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-3-CAR-GARAGE-WORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

3 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

3 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

3 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 3 vehicles + full hobby shop. Three 32×60 roll-up doors line the 50-foot side; a walk-in door enters the bench bay.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install Included. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday 3-car garage with workbench bay
Everyday 3-car garage with workbench bay
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 3-car garage with workbench bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOW3-car garage with workbench bay + seasonal storage
3-car garage with workbench bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$506/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $506/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay also viewed:

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay cost?

A 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay from Steel and Stud starts at $24,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $506/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud 3-car garage with workbench bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 3-car garage with workbench bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $506/month on a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage service shop with SUV raised on a lift in the open bay

32×60 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel garage workshop with open bay, classic car inside, and vintage motorcycle

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance | Steel and Stud, From $26,150

12

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,800$26,150SAVE $3,650
or $545/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Auto shops order the 32×60 with 12-14 ft legs to clear a two-post lift and.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$26,150$29,800Save $3,650
or as low as $545/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$26,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Lift-Ready Height
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your service-bay layout.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Lift bay 1LIFT BAY 2Parts / tools32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · service-bay layout

Lift bay 1 · Lift bay 2 · Parts / tools

Lift bay 1 at the front, lift bay 2 in the middle, parts / tools at the rear. Auto shops order the 32×60 with 12-14 ft legs to clear a two-post lift and a service truck bed.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Height.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop with lift clearance
Everyday auto repair shop with lift clearance
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop with lift clearance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop with lift clearance + seasonal storage
auto repair shop with lift clearance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$545/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $545/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance cost?

A 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance from Steel and Stud starts at $26,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $545/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop with lift clearance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop with lift clearance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $545/month on a 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel garage workshop with open bay, classic car inside, and vintage motorcycle

32×60 Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

32×60 Barndominium Shell

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud, From $24,300

12

32×60 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,700$24,300SAVE $3,400
or $506/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Barndominium Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of everyday barndominium shell space. Spray-foam-ready cavities and pre-framed openings make the conversion straightforward.

You’re viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,300$27,700Save $3,400
or as low as $506/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×50
smaller
$20,250
32×60
this size
$24,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. 32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of everyday barndominium shell space.

Bedroom(s)Great room / KitchenBath / Mech32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. Spray-foam-ready cavities and pre-framed openings make the conversion straightforward.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo-Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Barndominium Shell, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$506/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $506/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 barndominium shell cost?

A 32×60 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $24,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $506/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 barndominium shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $506/month on a 32×60 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 32×60 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 32×60 barndominium shell typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

32×60 Barndominium Shell

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage | Steel and Stud, From $26,150

12

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,800$26,150SAVE $3,650
or $545/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Small Business Commercial Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 32×60 small business commercial garage packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two 32×60 roll-ups on the gable end keep dispatch fast; an insulated.

You’re viewing:Small Business Commercial Garage·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$26,150$29,800Save $3,650
or as low as $545/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$26,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 2x 10×10 Roll-Ups
  • IBC Certified Available
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-SMALL-BUSINESS-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 32×60 small business commercial garage packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

3 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

3 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

3 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 3 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two 32×60 roll-ups on the gable end keep dispatch fast; an insulated office partition keeps the front presentable.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified Available. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Commercial Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Commercial Garage spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Commercial Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business commercial garage
Everyday small business commercial garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business commercial garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business commercial garage + seasonal storage
small business commercial garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$545/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 small business commercial garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $545/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Commercial Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Commercial Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Commercial Garage also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Commercial Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 small business commercial garage cost?

A 32×60 small business commercial garage from Steel and Stud starts at $26,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $545/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 small business commercial garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business commercial garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 small business commercial garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business commercial garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 small business commercial garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 small business commercial garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 small business commercial garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $545/month on a 32×60 small business commercial garage.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 small business commercial garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 small business commercial garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 32×60 small business commercial garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Commercial Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

32×60 Small Business Commercial Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building fabrication shop with glass roll-up doors and skid steer carrying steel

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays | Steel and Stud, From $26,550

12

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$30,250$26,550SAVE $3,700
or $553/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of heavy-duty fabrication shop with welding bays space. Tradespeople running a fab shop spec the 32×60 with 14-16 ft legs for an overhead crane runway and proper smoke/fume clearance over MIG.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$26,550$30,250Save $3,700
or as low as $553/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$26,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14′ Leg Height
  • 26 GA Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of heavy-duty fabrication shop with welding bays space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Tradespeople running a fab shop spec the 32×60 with 14-16 ft legs for an overhead crane runway and proper smoke/fume clearance over MIG and TIG stations.

💡 Pro tip:Crane-Ready Framing. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop with welding bays
Everyday fabrication shop with welding bays
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop with welding bays.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop with welding bays + seasonal storage
fabrication shop with welding bays + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$553/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $553/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays cost?

A 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays from Steel and Stud starts at $26,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $553/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop with welding bays ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop with welding bays different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $553/month on a 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$26,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building fabrication shop with glass roll-up doors and skid steer carrying steel

32×60 Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$26,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building at dusk with a motorhome pulling out and fishing boat parked

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters | Steel and Stud, From $24,300

12

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,700$24,300SAVE $3,400
or $506/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60RV Garage with Living Quarters

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 32×60 rv garage with living quarters fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. RV owners need 14 ft of door clearance for a Class A coach and 50.

You’re viewing:RV Garage with Living Quarters·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,300$27,700Save $3,400
or as low as $506/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$24,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • 16′ Leg Height
  • Class A Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-RV-GARAGE-LIVINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Our 32×60 rv garage with living quarters fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. RV owners need 14 ft of door clearance for a Class A coach and 50 feet of length to fit the rig with a tow vehicle behind it.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage with Living Quarters.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage with Living Quarters spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage with Living Quarters.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage with living quarters
Everyday rv garage with living quarters
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage with living quarters.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage with living quarters + seasonal storage
rv garage with living quarters + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$506/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 rv garage with living quarters is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $506/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage with Living Quarters shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Garage with Living Quarters · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage with Living Quarters also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage with Living Quarters questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters cost?

A 32×60 rv garage with living quarters from Steel and Stud starts at $24,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $506/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 rv garage with living quarters price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv garage with living quarters ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage with living quarters different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $506/month on a 32×60 rv garage with living quarters.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 rv garage with living quarters?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 rv garage with living quarters in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 32×60 rv garage with living quarters for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv garage with living quarters to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage with Living Quarters quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building at dusk with a motorhome pulling out and fishing boat parked

32×60 RV Garage with Living Quarters

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn | Steel and Stud, From $24,950

12

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,450$24,950SAVE $3,500
or $520/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Equipment Storage Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 32×60 equipment storage barn packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Farmers store a tractor with bush hog, a UTV, a hay wagon, and round bales in the same 1,1920 sq ft.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage Barn·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,950$28,450Save $3,500
or as low as $520/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×50
smaller
$20,900
32×60
this size
$24,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 14×12 Roll-Up
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 32×60 equipment storage barn packs 1920 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Farmers store a tractor with bush hog, a UTV, a hay wagon, and round bales in the same 1,1920 sq ft footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Equipment Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage barn
Everyday equipment storage barn
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage barn + seasonal storage
equipment storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$520/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 equipment storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $520/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Equipment Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Equipment Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Barn also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 equipment storage barn cost?

A 32×60 equipment storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $24,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $520/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 equipment storage barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 equipment storage barn?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 equipment storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 equipment storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 equipment storage barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $520/month on a 32×60 equipment storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 equipment storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 equipment storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 32×60 equipment storage barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

32×60 Equipment Storage Barn

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open sliding doors revealing wooden horse stalls at evening light

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room | Steel and Stud, From $24,950

12

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,450$24,950SAVE $3,500
or $520/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×604-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of rugged 4-stall horse shelter with tack room space. Hobby horse owners lay out four 32×60 stalls down one 50-foot wall, a 10-foot center aisle, and a 32×60 tack room plus feed storage on the.

You’re viewing:4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,950$28,450Save $3,500
or as low as $520/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$24,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Stall-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-4-STALL-HORSE-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. 32×60 delivers 1920 sq ft of rugged 4-stall horse shelter with tack room space.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed. Hobby horse owners lay out four 32×60 stalls down one 50-foot wall, a 10-foot center aisle, and a 32×60 tack room plus feed storage on the other end.

💡 Pro tip:Stall-Ready Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday 4-stall horse shelter with tack room
Everyday 4-stall horse shelter with tack room
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 4-stall horse shelter with tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOW4-stall horse shelter with tack room + seasonal storage
4-stall horse shelter with tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$520/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $520/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room cost?

A 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $24,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $520/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud 4-stall horse shelter with tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 4-stall horse shelter with tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $520/month on a 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open sliding doors revealing wooden horse stalls at evening light

32×60 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Espresso brown steel building with tall open bays storing a fifth-wheel RV and center console boat

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles | Steel and Stud, From $26,150

12

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,800$26,150SAVE $3,650
or $545/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Contractors with a four-truck fleet order the 32×60 with two 32×60 roll-ups on the.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$26,150$29,800Save $3,650
or as low as $545/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$26,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 2x 12×12 Roll-Ups
  • Mezzanine-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-FLEET-GARAGE-SERBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

3 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

3 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

3 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 3 vehicles + full hobby shop. Contractors with a four-truck fleet order the 32×60 with two 32×60 roll-ups on the long wall to drive in two trucks per bay end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet-Sized. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage for service vehicles
Everyday fleet garage for service vehicles
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage for service vehicles.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage for service vehicles + seasonal storage
fleet garage for service vehicles + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$545/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $545/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles cost?

A 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles from Steel and Stud starts at $26,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $545/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vehicles ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vehicles different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $545/month on a 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Espresso brown steel building with tall open bays storing a fifth-wheel RV and center console boat

32×60 Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building fabrication shop at night with flatbed trailer loaded with steel

32×60 Steel Workshop

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Steel Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $24,300

12

32×60 Steel Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,700$24,300SAVE $3,400
or $506/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Steel Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Steel Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 32×60 steel workshop? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Tradespeople and serious hobbyists spec a 32×60 workshop kit with one 32×60 roll-up, a walk-in.

You’re viewing:Steel Workshop·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,300$27,700Save $3,400
or as low as $506/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$24,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 2x Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-STEEL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Looking for a 32×60 steel workshop? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Tradespeople and serious hobbyists spec a 32×60 workshop kit with one 32×60 roll-up, a walk-in side door, two 32×60 windows for daylight, and R-19 batt insulation.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span Interior. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Steel Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Steel Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Steel Workshop spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Steel Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday steel workshop
Everyday steel workshop
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a steel workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsteel workshop + seasonal storage
steel workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Steel Workshop, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$506/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 steel workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $506/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Steel Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Steel Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Steel Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Steel Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Steel Workshop also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Steel Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 steel workshop cost?

A 32×60 steel workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $506/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 steel workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud steel workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 steel workshop?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud steel workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 steel workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 steel workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 steel workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $506/month on a 32×60 steel workshop.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 steel workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 steel workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 32×60 steel workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 32×60 steel workshop typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Steel Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building fabrication shop at night with flatbed trailer loaded with steel

32×60 Steel Workshop

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal garage with three tall doors storing a motorhome and trailered boat

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory | Steel and Stud, From $26,150

12

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$29,800$26,150SAVE $3,650
or $545/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Enclosed Storage for Inventory

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Small business owners storing seasonal inventory or contractor materials lock.

You’re viewing:Enclosed Storage for Inventory·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$26,150$29,800Save $3,650
or as low as $545/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$26,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • Mezzanine-Ready
  • Keypad Entry
  • Lockable Steel Shell
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-ENCLOSED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory fits 32-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Small business owners storing seasonal inventory or contractor materials lock down 1,1920 sq ft of dry, secured space with a single 32×60 roll-up and a keypad walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Lockable Steel Shell.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Enclosed Storage for Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Enclosed Storage for Inventory spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Enclosed Storage for Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday enclosed storage for inventory
Everyday enclosed storage for inventory
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a enclosed storage for inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWenclosed storage for inventory + seasonal storage
enclosed storage for inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$545/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $545/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Enclosed Storage for Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Enclosed Storage for Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Enclosed Storage for Inventory also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🎯 32×60

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

32×60 boat & toy hauler storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Toy Hauler Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Enclosed Storage for Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory cost?

A 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $26,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $545/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud enclosed storage for inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud enclosed storage for inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $545/month on a 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 32×60 enclosed storage for inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Enclosed Storage for Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal garage with three tall doors storing a motorhome and trailered boat

32×60 Enclosed Storage for Inventory

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$26,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior storing a motorhome, jet ski, and bass boat on clean concrete

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage | Steel and Stud, From $24,300

12

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,700$24,300SAVE $3,400
or $506/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings32×60Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Lake-house owners and weekenders fit a 26-foot wakeboat on a trailer, a side-by-side.

You’re viewing:Boat & Toy Hauler Storage·Size32×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,300$27,700Save $3,400
or as low as $506/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 32×60
32×60
this size
$24,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Pull-Through Length
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-32X60-BOAT-TOY-HAULER-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

32 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage? At 1920 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

BOAT + TRAILERDaily driverOutboard / rinse32′ × 60′ · 1,920 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Lake-house owners and weekenders fit a 26-foot wakeboat on a trailer, a side-by-side, two ATVs, and a workbench inside the 32×60.

💡 Pro tip:Pull-Through Length.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Toy Hauler Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 32×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage spec sheet.

Width32′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Toy Hauler Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & toy hauler storage
Everyday boat & toy hauler storage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & toy hauler storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & toy hauler storage + seasonal storage
boat & toy hauler storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage, what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$506/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $506/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 32×60?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 32′ × 60′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Toy Hauler Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 32×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 32×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Toy Hauler Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
33×61×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Toy Hauler Storage also viewed:

🏡 32×60

3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay

32×60 3-car garage with workbench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 3-Car Garage with Workbench Bay →

🏢 32×60

Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance

32×60 auto repair shop with lift clearance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop with Lift Clearance →

🏡 32×60

Barndominium Shell

32×60 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 32×60

Small Business Commercial Garage

32×60 small business commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Commercial Garage →

🏭 32×60

Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays

32×60 fabrication shop with welding bays configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop with Welding Bays →

🎯 32×60

RV Garage with Living Quarters

32×60 rv garage with living quarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →

🌾 32×60

Equipment Storage Barn

32×60 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 32×60

4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room

32×60 4-stall horse shelter with tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 4-Stall Horse Shelter with Tack Room →

🏢 32×60

Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles

32×60 fleet garage for service vehicles configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vehicles →

🏡 32×60

Steel Workshop

32×60 steel workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Steel Workshop →

🏢 32×60

Enclosed Storage for Inventory

32×60 enclosed storage for inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Storage for Inventory →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Toy Hauler Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage cost?

A 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage from Steel and Stud starts at $24,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $506/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & toy hauler storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & toy hauler storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $506/month on a 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage.

What warranty comes with the 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 32×60 boat & toy hauler storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & toy hauler storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Toy Hauler Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior storing a motorhome, jet ski, and bass boat on clean concrete

32×60 Boat & Toy Hauler Storage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

32′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 32×60 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with red roof and three bays housing fleet box trucks

36×50 Commercial Garage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Commercial Garage | Steel and Stud, From $24,650

12

36×50 Commercial Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,100$24,650SAVE $3,450
or $514/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Commercial Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Commercial Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 36×50 commercial garage? At 1800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Auto shops and fleet operators run three 36×50 roll-up bays across the 36 ft front wall, leaving 48.

You’re viewing:Commercial Garage·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,650$28,100Save $3,450
or as low as $514/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$23,750
36×50
this size
$24,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 3 Roll-Up Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 36×50 commercial garage? At 1800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

3 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

3 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

3 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 3 vehicles + full hobby shop. Auto shops and fleet operators run three 36×50 roll-up bays across the 36 ft front wall, leaving 48 ft of depth for lifts, alignment racks, and parts shelving.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Eaves. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Commercial Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage
Everyday commercial garage
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage + seasonal storage
commercial garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Commercial Garage, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$514/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 commercial garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $514/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Commercial Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Commercial Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 commercial garage cost?

A 36×50 commercial garage from Steel and Stud starts at $24,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $514/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 commercial garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 commercial garage?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 commercial garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 commercial garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 commercial garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $514/month on a 36×50 commercial garage.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 commercial garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 commercial garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 36×50 commercial garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with red roof and three bays housing fleet box trucks

36×50 Commercial Garage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building with red roof and four glass roll-up doors at a steel auto shop

36×50 Auto Repair Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $24,650

12

36×50 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,100$24,650SAVE $3,450
or $514/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Auto Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

36×50 delivers 1800 sq ft of code-compliant auto repair shop space. Independent mechanics order this footprint for two-bay service with a dedicated alignment bay and tool room. 14-16 ft legs handle scissor lifts and.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,650$28,100Save $3,450
or as low as $514/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$23,750
36×50
this size
$24,650
36×60
longer
$29,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Insulated Walls
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your service-bay layout.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. 36×50 delivers 1800 sq ft of code-compliant auto repair shop space.

Lift bay 1LIFT BAY 2Parts / tools36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · service-bay layout

Lift bay 1 · Lift bay 2 · Parts / tools

Lift bay 1 at the front, lift bay 2 in the middle, parts / tools at the rear. Independent mechanics order this footprint for two-bay service with a dedicated alignment bay and tool room.

💡 Pro tip:Office Partition Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Auto Repair Shop, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$514/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $514/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 auto repair shop cost?

A 36×50 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $514/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 auto repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $514/month on a 36×50 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 36×50 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building with red roof and four glass roll-up doors at a steel auto shop

36×50 Auto Repair Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green steel structure workshop at twilight with welding glow through open bay

36×50 Fabrication Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $25,050

12

36×50 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,550$25,050SAVE $3,500
or $522/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 36×50 fabrication shop fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Welders and metal fabricators spec 16-20 ft eaves for crane rails, plasma tables, and.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,050$28,550Save $3,500
or as low as $522/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$24,150
36×50
this size
$25,050
36×60
longer
$29,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready Framing
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 36×50 fabrication shop fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Welders and metal fabricators spec 16-20 ft eaves for crane rails, plasma tables, and vertical material storage.

💡 Pro tip:Engineered for Hoist Loads. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$522/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $522/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 fabrication shop cost?

A 36×50 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $522/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $522/month on a 36×50 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 36×50 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 36×50 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$25,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green steel structure workshop at twilight with welding glow through open bay

36×50 Fabrication Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building fabrication shop at night with flatbed trailer loaded with steel

36×50 Workshop Kit

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Workshop Kit | Steel and Stud, From $22,800

12

36×50 Workshop Kit
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Workshop Kit

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Workshop Kit, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 36×50 workshop kit packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Woodworkers and hobbyists order the 36×50 workshop kit as a dedicated shop separate from the house.

You’re viewing:Workshop Kit·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$21,900
36×50
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 30×30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-WORKSHOP-KITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 36×50 workshop kit packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Woodworkers and hobbyists order the 36×50 workshop kit as a dedicated shop separate from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Wired-Ready Layout. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Workshop Kit in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit
Everyday workshop kit
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit + seasonal storage
workshop kit + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Workshop Kit, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 workshop kit is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Workshop Kit buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Workshop Kit

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Kit · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 workshop kit cost?

A 36×50 workshop kit from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 workshop kit price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop kit ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 workshop kit?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 workshop kit need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 workshop kit delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 workshop kit without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 36×50 workshop kit.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 workshop kit?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 workshop kit in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 36×50 workshop kit add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 36×50 workshop kit typically adds $14,400–$21,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building fabrication shop at night with flatbed trailer loaded with steel

36×50 Workshop Kit

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy metal building barndominium home with timber porch posts and lit windows below mountain peaks

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud, From $22,800

12

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Metal Barndominium Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Our 36×50 metal barndominium shell fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Barndo builders use 36×50 as the shell for a 3-bedroom layout plus a 2-bay.

You’re viewing:Metal Barndominium Shell·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$21,900
36×50
this size
$22,800
36×60
longer
$27,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Wainscoting
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-METAL-BARNDOMINIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 36×50 metal barndominium shell fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Bedroom(s)Great room / KitchenBath / Mech36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. Barndo builders use 36×50 as the shell for a 3-bedroom layout plus a 2-bay attached shop.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo Split Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barndominium shell
Everyday metal barndominium shell
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
metal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 metal barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 metal barndominium shell cost?

A 36×50 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 metal barndominium shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 metal barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 metal barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 metal barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 metal barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 36×50 metal barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 metal barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 metal barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 36×50 metal barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 36×50 metal barndominium shell typically adds $14,400–$21,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy metal building barndominium home with timber porch posts and lit windows below mountain peaks

36×50 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit horse barn with black roof and black horse by wood fence

36×50 Horse Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $23,450

12

36×50 Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,750$23,450SAVE $3,300
or $489/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 36×50 horse barn fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers configure 36×50 as a six-stall horse barn with a center aisle. 36×50 stalls.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,450$26,750Save $3,300
or as low as $489/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$22,550
36×50
this size
$23,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Gable Vents
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-HORSE-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Our 36×50 horse barn fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

3 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Hobby farmers configure 36×50 as a six-stall horse barn with a center aisle.

💡 Pro tip:Center-Aisle Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn
Everyday horse barn
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn + seasonal storage
horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Horse Barn, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$489/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $489/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 horse barn cost?

A 36×50 horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $23,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $489/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 horse barn?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $489/month on a 36×50 horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 36×50 horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit horse barn with black roof and black horse by wood fence

36×50 Horse Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn | Steel and Stud, From $23,450

12

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,750$23,450SAVE $3,300
or $489/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Equipment Storage Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 36×50 equipment storage barn fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Farmers park combines, tractors with cabs, and tall implements under 14-16 ft.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage Barn·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,450$26,750Save $3,300
or as low as $489/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$22,550
36×50
this size
$23,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable Option
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 36×50 equipment storage barn fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Farmers park combines, tractors with cabs, and tall implements under 14-16 ft eaves.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Ready.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Equipment Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage barn
Everyday equipment storage barn
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage barn + seasonal storage
equipment storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$489/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 equipment storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $489/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Equipment Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Equipment Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Barn also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 equipment storage barn cost?

A 36×50 equipment storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $23,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $489/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 equipment storage barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 equipment storage barn?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 equipment storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 equipment storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 equipment storage barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $489/month on a 36×50 equipment storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 equipment storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 equipment storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 36×50 equipment storage barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building interior with wood trusses storing a tractor, baler, and farm machinery

36×50 Equipment Storage Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

36×50 Fleet Garage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $24,650

12

36×50 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,100$24,650SAVE $3,450
or $514/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 36×50 fleet garage? At 1800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Three roll-up doors front, three back makes pull-through parking possible, eliminating the need to back.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,650$28,100Save $3,450
or as low as $514/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$23,750
36×50
this size
$24,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 6 Roll-Up Doors
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Looking for a 36×50 fleet garage? At 1800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

3 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

3 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

3 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 3 vehicles + full hobby shop. Three roll-up doors front, three back makes pull-through parking possible, eliminating the need to back rigs out before the morning route.

💡 Pro tip:Pull-Through Bays. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$514/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $514/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 fleet garage cost?

A 36×50 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $24,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $514/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 fleet garage?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $514/month on a 36×50 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 36×50 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel garage with three roll-up doors and a fleet of white cargo vans parked outside

36×50 Fleet Garage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

36×50 Hay Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $23,450

12

36×50 Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,750$23,450SAVE $3,300
or $489/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 36×50 hay barn packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Cattle ranchers stack square bales 14-16 ft high under 36×50, holding roughly 300-400 small squares or 60-80 round.

You’re viewing:Hay Barn·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,450$26,750Save $3,300
or as low as $489/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$22,550
36×50
this size
$23,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Partial Walls
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-HAY-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 36×50 hay barn packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Cattle ranchers stack square bales 14-16 ft high under 36×50, holding roughly 300-400 small squares or 60-80 round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Ventilated Hay Storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay barn
Everyday hay barn
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay barn + seasonal storage
hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Hay Barn, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$489/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $489/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 hay barn cost?

A 36×50 hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $23,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $489/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 hay barn?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $489/month on a 36×50 hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 36×50 hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with red roof, pickup truck, and flatbed trailer hauling hay bales

36×50 Hay Barn

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn glowing at foggy dawn with a tractor parked in the lit bay

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop | Steel and Stud, From $25,050

12

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,550$25,050SAVE $3,500
or $522/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Contractor Yard Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 36×50 contractor yard shop packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople running plumbing, HVAC, or electrical companies use 36×50 to.

You’re viewing:Contractor Yard Shop·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$25,050$28,550Save $3,500
or as low as $522/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$24,150
36×50
this size
$25,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Insulated Office Wall
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-CONTRACTOR-YARD-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 36×50 contractor yard shop packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Inventory racksLOADING BAYOffice / Desk36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Tradespeople running plumbing, HVAC, or electrical companies use 36×50 to combine inventory storage, a parts counter, and parking for two service trucks indoors overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Office + Shop Split.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Contractor Yard Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Yard Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Yard Shop spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Yard Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor yard shop
Everyday contractor yard shop
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor yard shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor yard shop + seasonal storage
contractor yard shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$522/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 contractor yard shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $522/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Yard Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Contractor Yard Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Contractor Yard Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Yard Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Yard Shop also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Yard Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 contractor yard shop cost?

A 36×50 contractor yard shop from Steel and Stud starts at $25,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $522/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 contractor yard shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor yard shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 contractor yard shop?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor yard shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 contractor yard shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 contractor yard shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 contractor yard shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $522/month on a 36×50 contractor yard shop.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 contractor yard shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 contractor yard shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 36×50 contractor yard shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 36×50 contractor yard shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Yard Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$25,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal barn glowing at foggy dawn with a tractor parked in the lit bay

36×50 Contractor Yard Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$25,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

36×50 RV & Boat Storage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $22,800

12

36×50 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50RV & Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 36×50 rv & boat storage packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. RV owners and boat enthusiasts park a Class A motorhome (up to 45 ft) plus a bass boat or.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$21,900
36×50
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 14×14 Roll-Up Door
  • Concrete Pad
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 36×50 rv & boat storage packs 1800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. RV owners and boat enthusiasts park a Class A motorhome (up to 45 ft) plus a bass boat or side-by-sides under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 RV & Boat Storage, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🏢 36×50

Storefront with Shop

36×50 storefront with shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storefront with Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 rv & boat storage cost?

A 36×50 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 rv & boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 36×50 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 36×50 rv & boat storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

36×50 RV & Boat Storage

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building furniture showroom with glass walls and patio seating displays outside

36×50 Storefront with Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

36×50 Storefront with Shop | Steel and Stud, From $24,650

12

36×50 Storefront with Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$28,100$24,650SAVE $3,450
or $514/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings36×50Storefront with Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

36×50 Storefront with Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 36×50 storefront with shop fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Small business owners running tire shops, small-engine repair, or feed stores spec 36×50.

You’re viewing:Storefront with Shop·Size36×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,650$28,100Save $3,450
or as low as $514/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 36×50
36×48
smaller
$23,750
36×50
this size
$24,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,800 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-36X50-STOREFRONT-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your retail-floor layout.

36 feet wide × 50 feet long. Front glass + side entrance, rear stock load-in. Our 36×50 storefront with shop fits 36-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Display window + EntrySALES FLOORStockroom + Office36′ × 50′ · 1,800 sq ft · retail-floor layout

Display window + Entry · Sales floor · Stockroom + Office

Display window + Entry at the front, sales floor in the middle, stockroom + office at the rear. Capacity: ~1260 sf of sales floor. Small business owners running tire shops, small-engine repair, or feed stores spec 36×50 with storefront windows across one gable and a 36×50 roll-up door for receiving.

💡 Pro tip:Retail + Service Split. Size affords: display wall, POS counter, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 36×50 Storefront with Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storefront with Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 36×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storefront with Shop spec sheet.

Width36′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storefront with Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday storefront with shop
Everyday storefront with shop
1,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storefront with shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorefront with shop + seasonal storage
storefront with shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

36×50 Storefront with Shop, what makes it different.

1,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$514/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 36×50 storefront with shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $514/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 36×50?

1,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 36′ × 50′ footprint with 1,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $14,400–$21,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storefront with Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 36×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 36×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 36×50 Storefront with Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 36×50 Storefront with Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storefront with Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
37×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,100+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storefront with Shop also viewed:

🏢 36×50

Commercial Garage

36×50 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🏢 36×50

Auto Repair Shop

36×50 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 36×50

Fabrication Shop

36×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 36×50

Workshop Kit

36×50 workshop kit configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop Kit →

🏡 36×50

Metal Barndominium Shell

36×50 metal barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →

🌾 36×50

Horse Barn

36×50 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🌾 36×50

Equipment Storage Barn

36×50 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 36×50

Fleet Garage

36×50 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 36×50

Hay Barn

36×50 hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn →

🏭 36×50

Contractor Yard Shop

36×50 contractor yard shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$25,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Shop →

🎯 36×50

RV & Boat Storage

36×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storefront with Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 36×50 storefront with shop cost?

A 36×50 storefront with shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $514/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 36×50 storefront with shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storefront with shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 36×50 storefront with shop?

Almost always for 1,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storefront with shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 36×50 storefront with shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 36×50 storefront with shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 36×50 storefront with shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $514/month on a 36×50 storefront with shop.

What warranty comes with the 36×50 storefront with shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 36×50 storefront with shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 36×50 storefront with shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Storefront with Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building furniture showroom with glass walls and patio seating displays outside

36×50 Storefront with Shop

1,800 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

36′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 36×50 steel building delivers 1,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

40×120 Commercial Warehouse

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Commercial Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

40×120 Commercial Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Commercial Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Commercial Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Practical 4,800 sq ft warehouse footprint for inventory, pallet racking, fulfillment, parts storage, bulk goods, and business expansion without moving to a much larger building.

You’re viewing:Commercial Warehouse·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $26,500
  • Rack Ready
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-COMMERCIAL-WAREHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Practical 4,800 sq ft warehouse footprint for inventory, pallet racking, fulfillment, parts storage, bulk goods, and business expansion without moving to a much larger building.

Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOFFICE + BREAK ROOM40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~96 pallets, light-duty forklift OK.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Commercial Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Warehouse spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial warehouse
Everyday commercial warehouse
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial warehouse + seasonal storage
commercial warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Commercial Warehouse, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 commercial warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Commercial Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Commercial Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 commercial warehouse cost?

A 40×120 commercial warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 commercial warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 commercial warehouse?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 commercial warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 commercial warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 commercial warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 40×120 commercial warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 commercial warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 commercial warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×120 commercial warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

40×120 Commercial Warehouse

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $90,100

12

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,700$90,100SAVE $12,600
or $1877/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Clear-span fabrication floor for welding bays, assembly lines, CNC.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,100$102,700Save $12,600
or as low as $1877/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$90,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $36,000
  • Fabrication Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Clear-span fabrication floor for welding bays, assembly lines, CNC work, light manufacturing, and tool storage.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing / fabrication shop
Everyday manufacturing / fabrication shop
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing / fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing / fabrication shop + seasonal storage
manufacturing / fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1877/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1877/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop cost?

A 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $90,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1877/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing / fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing / fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1877/month on a 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

40×120 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with brown roll-up doors and white fleet pickups at golden hour

40×120 Fleet Garage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

40×120 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 40×120 fleet garage fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Park work trucks, service vans, trailers, landscaping vehicles, or municipal fleet equipment.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×90
smaller
$67,750
40×120
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $31,500
  • Fleet Ready
  • Multi-Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 40×120 fleet garage fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop. Park work trucks, service vans, trailers, landscaping vehicles, or municipal fleet equipment under one enclosed roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 fleet garage cost?

A 40×120 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 fleet garage?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 40×120 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×120 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with brown roll-up doors and white fleet pickups at golden hour

40×120 Fleet Garage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

40×120 delivers 4800 sq ft of code-compliant distribution / fulfillment bay space. Add dock-ready openings, shelving rows, and a front office buildout.

You’re viewing:Distribution / Fulfillment Bay·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $32,000
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-DISTRIBUTION-FULBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. 40×120 delivers 4800 sq ft of code-compliant distribution / fulfillment bay space.

Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOFFICE + BREAK ROOM40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~96 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Add dock-ready openings, shelving rows, and a front office buildout.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution / Fulfillment Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution / Fulfillment Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution / fulfillment bay
Everyday distribution / fulfillment bay
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution / fulfillment bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution / fulfillment bay + seasonal storage
distribution / fulfillment bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution / Fulfillment Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution / Fulfillment Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution / Fulfillment Bay also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay cost?

A 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution / fulfillment bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution / fulfillment bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution / Fulfillment Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

40×120 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure with lean-to canopy sheltering a green tractor and boat

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building | Steel and Stud, From $88,500

12

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,900$88,500SAVE $12,400
or $1844/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Agricultural Equipment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

40×120 delivers 4800 sq ft of rugged agricultural equipment building space. Store tractors, hay, feed, implements, UTVs, trailers, and farm tools in a wide commercial-grade steel structure. Add lean-tos for extra.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Equipment Building·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$88,500$100,900Save $12,400
or as low as $1844/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$88,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $22,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-AGRICULTURAL-EQUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural equipment building layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. 40×120 delivers 4800 sq ft of rugged agricultural equipment building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · agricultural equipment building layout

Agricultural Equipment Building layout.

40×120 delivers 4800 sq ft of rugged agricultural equipment building space. Store tractors, hay, feed, implements, UTVs, trailers, and farm tools in a wide commercial-grade steel structure. Add lean-tos for extra covered storage on either side.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Equipment Building at 40×120, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Equipment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Equipment Building spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Equipment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural equipment building
Everyday agricultural equipment building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural equipment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural equipment building + seasonal storage
agricultural equipment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1844/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 agricultural equipment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1844/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Equipment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Equipment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Equipment Building also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Equipment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 agricultural equipment building cost?

A 40×120 agricultural equipment building from Steel and Stud starts at $88,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1844/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 agricultural equipment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural equipment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 agricultural equipment building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural equipment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 agricultural equipment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 agricultural equipment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 agricultural equipment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1844/month on a 40×120 agricultural equipment building.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 agricultural equipment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 agricultural equipment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 40×120 agricultural equipment building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Equipment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel structure with lean-to canopy sheltering a green tractor and boat

40×120 Agricultural Equipment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage at sunset with a tow truck unloading a sedan outside service bays

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $87,850

12

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,150$87,850SAVE $12,300
or $1830/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120RV / Boat Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 40×120 rv / boat storage building packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Store motorhomes, boats, fifth wheels, trailers, side-by-sides, and seasonal.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Storage Building·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$87,850$100,150Save $12,300
or as low as $1830/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$87,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $26,500
  • Up to 18’+ Tall
  • Oversized Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-RV-BOAT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 40×120 rv / boat storage building packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Store motorhomes, boats, fifth wheels, trailers, side-by-sides, and seasonal equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Storage Building spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat storage building
Everyday rv / boat storage building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat storage building + seasonal storage
rv / boat storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1830/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 rv / boat storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1830/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 rv / boat storage building cost?

A 40×120 rv / boat storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $87,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1830/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 rv / boat storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 rv / boat storage building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 rv / boat storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 rv / boat storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 rv / boat storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1830/month on a 40×120 rv / boat storage building.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 rv / boat storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 rv / boat storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×120 rv / boat storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×120 rv / boat storage building typically adds $38,400–$57,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage at sunset with a tow truck unloading a sedan outside service bays

40×120 RV / Boat Storage Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building retail showroom interior with wood shelving, housewares displays, and browsing shoppers

40×120 Retail Showroom

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

40×120 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Retail Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Retail Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 40×120 retail showroom fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. 4,4800 sq ft of open showroom for equipment sales, auto display, furniture, building supplies.

You’re viewing:Retail Showroom·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×90
smaller
$67,750
40×120
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $34,000
  • Storefront Glazing
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Our 40×120 retail showroom fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~2880 sf showroom, 1440 sf stock. 4,4800 sq ft of open showroom for equipment sales, auto display, furniture, building supplies, or mixed retail and storage.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Retail Showroom, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 retail showroom cost?

A 40×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 retail showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 retail showroom?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 40×120 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×120 retail showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building retail showroom interior with wood shelving, housewares displays, and browsing shoppers

40×120 Retail Showroom

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility | Steel and Stud, From $87,850

12

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,150$87,850SAVE $12,300
or $1830/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Indoor Sports / Training Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Build a private athletic space for batting cages, pickleball courts, martial.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports / Training Facility·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$87,850$100,150Save $12,300
or as low as $1830/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$87,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $30,000
  • Insulated
  • Clear Span
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-INDOOR-SPORTS-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Looking for a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Build a private athletic space for batting cages, pickleball courts, martial arts, strength training, turf lanes, or indoor practice.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Sports / Training Facility at 40×120, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports / Training Facility spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports / training facility
Everyday indoor sports / training facility
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports / training facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1830/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 indoor sports / training facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1830/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports / Training Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports / Training Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports / Training Facility also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports / Training Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility cost?

A 40×120 indoor sports / training facility from Steel and Stud starts at $87,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1830/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 indoor sports / training facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1830/month on a 40×120 indoor sports / training facility.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 indoor sports / training facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 indoor sports / training facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×120 indoor sports / training facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports / training facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports / Training Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building gym with navy roof, wainscot, and indoor turf entry

40×120 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building | Steel and Stud, From $89,800

12

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,350$89,800SAVE $12,550
or $1871/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Municipal / Public Works Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 40×120 municipal / public works building packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, emergency response staging, park maintenance.

You’re viewing:Municipal / Public Works Building·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,800$102,350Save $12,550
or as low as $1871/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$89,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-MUNICIPAL-PUBLICBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal / public works building layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 40×120 municipal / public works building packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · municipal / public works building layout

Municipal / Public Works Building layout.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 40×120 municipal / public works building packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, emergency response staging, park maintenance equipment, utility vehicles, or municipal fleet protection with engineered drawings and high-wind upgrades available.

💡 Pro tip:Municipal / Public Works Building at 40×120, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Public Works Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Public Works Building spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Public Works Building.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / public works building
Everyday municipal / public works building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / public works building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / public works building + seasonal storage
municipal / public works building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1871/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 municipal / public works building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1871/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Public Works Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Public Works Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Public Works Building also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Public Works Building questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 municipal / public works building cost?

A 40×120 municipal / public works building from Steel and Stud starts at $89,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1871/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 municipal / public works building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal / public works building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 municipal / public works building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / public works building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 municipal / public works building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 municipal / public works building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 municipal / public works building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1871/month on a 40×120 municipal / public works building.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 municipal / public works building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 municipal / public works building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 40×120 municipal / public works building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Public Works Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

40×120 Municipal / Public Works Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage at a lakefront with Class C motorhome, camper inside, and bass boat

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Trucking / Service Terminal

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 40×120 trucking / service terminal fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Use the 100-foot length for service bays, small cross-dock operations, trailer.

You’re viewing:Trucking / Service Terminal·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $32,500
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-TRUCKING-SERVICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your trucking / service terminal layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Our 40×120 trucking / service terminal fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · trucking / service terminal layout

Trucking / Service Terminal layout.

Our 40×120 trucking / service terminal fits 40-foot widths and 120-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Use the 100-foot length for service bays, small cross-dock operations, trailer staging, vehicle maintenance, or drive-through commercial workflow with oversized door packages.

💡 Pro tip:Trucking / Service Terminal at 40×120, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking / Service Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking / Service Terminal spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking / Service Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking / service terminal
Everyday trucking / service terminal
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking / service terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking / service terminal + seasonal storage
trucking / service terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 trucking / service terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking / Service Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking / Service Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking / Service Terminal also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏛️ 40×120

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×120 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking / Service Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 trucking / service terminal cost?

A 40×120 trucking / service terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 trucking / service terminal price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud trucking / service terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 trucking / service terminal?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking / service terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 trucking / service terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 trucking / service terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 trucking / service terminal without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 40×120 trucking / service terminal.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 trucking / service terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 trucking / service terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×120 trucking / service terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking / Service Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage at a lakefront with Class C motorhome, camper inside, and bass boat

40×120 Trucking / Service Terminal

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with brown roof trim and white door beside white church

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $89,800

12

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,350$89,800SAVE $12,550
or $1871/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×120Worship / Fellowship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

4,800 sq ft column-free space for worship seating, classrooms, fellowship meals, outreach programs, storage, offices, or community gatherings.

You’re viewing:Worship / Fellowship Hall·Size40×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,800$102,350Save $12,550
or as low as $1871/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×120
40×120
this size
$89,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X120-WORSHIP-FELLOWSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

40 feet wide × 120 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 4,800 sq ft column-free space for worship seating, classrooms, fellowship meals, outreach programs, storage, offices, or community gatherings.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS40′ × 120′ · 4,800 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~480 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width40′
Length120′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship / fellowship hall
Everyday worship / fellowship hall
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1871/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×120 worship / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1871/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×120?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 120′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 40×120

Commercial Warehouse

40×120 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 40×120

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×120 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 40×120

Fleet Garage

40×120 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 40×120

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×120 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →

🌾 40×120

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×120 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 40×120

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×120 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 40×120

Retail Showroom

40×120 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 40×120

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×120 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 40×120

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×120 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏢 40×120

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×120 trucking / service terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall cost?

A 40×120 worship / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $89,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1871/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×120 worship / fellowship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud worship / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1871/month on a 40×120 worship / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 40×120 worship / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×120 worship / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 40×120 worship / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with brown roof trim and white door beside white church

40×120 Worship / Fellowship Hall

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×120 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with lean-to porch sheltering classic car and vintage truck inside

40×20 Metal Carport

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×20 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud, From $11,800

12

40×20 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,450$11,800SAVE $1,650
or $246/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×20Metal Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×20 Metal Carport, built for daily backyard use.

40×20 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday metal carport space. Open 40×20 steel cover for vehicles, trailers, boats, mowers, or equipment. The 40 width allows multiple parking bays under one roof.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport·Size40×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×20
40×20
this size
$11,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $6,495
  • 3 Roof Styles
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X20-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

40 feet wide × 20 feet long. 40×20 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday metal carport space.

Cover bayPillar zoneApproach apron40′ × 20′ · 800 sq ft · open-cover layout

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Open 40×20 steel cover for vehicles, trailers, boats, mowers, or equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport at 40×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×20 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width40′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×20 Metal Carport, what makes it different.

800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×20 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×20?

800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 20′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×20 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×20 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 40×20

Metal Garage

40×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 40×20

Workshop / Hobby Space

40×20 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏢 40×20

Commercial Steel Building

40×20 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 40×20

RV / Boat Storage

40×20 rv / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage →

🎯 40×20

Home Gym / Studio

40×20 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 40×20

Metal Barn

40×20 metal barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn →

🎯 40×20

Man Cave / She Shed

40×20 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 40×20

Factory / Warehouse

40×20 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 40×20

Government / Institutional

40×20 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 40×20

Equestrian / Tack Storage

40×20 equestrian / tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Storage →

🏛️ 40×20

Community / Worship Space

40×20 community / worship space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 40×20 metal carport cost?

A 40×20 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×20 metal carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×20 metal carport?

Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×20 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×20 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×20 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 40×20 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 40×20 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×20 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×20 metal carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×20 metal carport typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with lean-to porch sheltering classic car and vintage truck inside

40×20 Metal Carport

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at night with open bays showing cars on two post lifts

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $11,800

12

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,450$11,800SAVE $1,650
or $246/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×20Workshop / Hobby Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

800 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, crafts, tool storage, and hobby work. Add insulation, windows, walk-in doors, and roll-up doors.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size40×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×20
40×20
this size
$11,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X20-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

40 feet wide × 20 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 800 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, crafts, tool storage, and hobby work.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack40′ × 20′ · 800 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Add insulation, windows, walk-in doors, and roll-up doors.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width40′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×20 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×20?

800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 20′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 40×20

Metal Garage

40×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 40×20

Metal Carport

40×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 40×20

Commercial Steel Building

40×20 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 40×20

RV / Boat Storage

40×20 rv / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage →

🎯 40×20

Home Gym / Studio

40×20 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 40×20

Metal Barn

40×20 metal barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn →

🎯 40×20

Man Cave / She Shed

40×20 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 40×20

Factory / Warehouse

40×20 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 40×20

Government / Institutional

40×20 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 40×20

Equestrian / Tack Storage

40×20 equestrian / tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Storage →

🏛️ 40×20

Community / Worship Space

40×20 community / worship space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 40×20 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 40×20 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×20 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×20 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×20 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×20 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×20 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 40×20 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 40×20 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×20 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×20 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×20 workshop / hobby space typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at night with open bays showing cars on two post lifts

40×20 Workshop / Hobby Space

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brick red metal building kit with gable truss accent and double doors open to seating

40×20 Commercial Steel Building

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×20 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $13,650

12

40×20 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,550$13,650SAVE $1,900
or $284/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×20Commercial Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×20 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Use the 40×20 footprint for retail storage, office support, auto detailing, service bays, contractor storage, or business operations. Certified drawings and 12-gauge upgrades are available.

You’re viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size40×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×20
40×20
this size
$13,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 800 sq ft enclosed
  • From style=”margin-top:18px”1,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X20-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial steel building layout.

40 feet wide × 20 feet long. Use the 40×20 footprint for retail storage, office support, auto detailing, service bays, contractor storage, or business operations.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE40′ × 20′ · 800 sq ft · commercial steel building layout

Commercial Steel Building layout.

Use the 40×20 footprint for retail storage, office support, auto detailing, service bays, contractor storage, or business operations. Certified drawings and 12-gauge upgrades are available.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Steel Building at 40×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×20 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width40′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×20 Commercial Steel Building, what makes it different.

800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×20 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×20?

800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 20′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×20 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×20 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 40×20

Metal Garage

40×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 40×20

Workshop / Hobby Space

40×20 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 40×20

Metal Carport

40×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏡 40×20

RV / Boat Storage

40×20 rv / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage →

🎯 40×20

Home Gym / Studio

40×20 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 40×20

Metal Barn

40×20 metal barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn →

🎯 40×20

Man Cave / She Shed

40×20 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 40×20

Factory / Warehouse

40×20 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 40×20

Government / Institutional

40×20 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 40×20

Equestrian / Tack Storage

40×20 equestrian / tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Storage →

🏛️ 40×20

Community / Worship Space

40×20 community / worship space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 40×20 commercial steel building cost?

A 40×20 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×20 commercial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×20 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×20 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×20 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×20 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 40×20 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 40×20 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×20 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×20 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brick red metal building kit with gable truss accent and double doors open to seating

40×20 Commercial Steel Building

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

40×20 RV / Boat Storage

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×20 RV / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,800

12

40×20 RV / Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,450$11,800SAVE $1,650
or $246/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×20RV / Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×20 RV / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

40×20 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday rv / boat storage space. Wide covered storage for RVs, boats, trailers, side-by-sides, and seasonal equipment. Add tall legs, side panels, and large doors for year-round protection.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Storage·Size40×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×20
40×20
this size
$11,800
40×48
longer
$35,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,995
  • Up to 16 Tall
  • 12’W Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X20-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

40 feet wide × 20 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. 40×20 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday rv / boat storage space.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire40′ × 20′ · 800 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 16ft + 1 daily driver. Wide covered storage for RVs, boats, trailers, side-by-sides, and seasonal equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×20 RV / Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width40′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat storage
Everyday rv / boat storage
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat storage + seasonal storage
rv / boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×20 RV / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×20 rv / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×20?

800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 20′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×20 RV / Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×20 RV / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Storage also viewed:

🏡 40×20

Metal Garage

40×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 40×20

Workshop / Hobby Space

40×20 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 40×20

Metal Carport

40×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 40×20

Commercial Steel Building

40×20 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🎯 40×20

Home Gym / Studio

40×20 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 40×20

Metal Barn

40×20 metal barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn →

🎯 40×20

Man Cave / She Shed

40×20 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 40×20

Factory / Warehouse

40×20 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 40×20

Government / Institutional

40×20 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 40×20

Equestrian / Tack Storage

40×20 equestrian / tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Storage →

🏛️ 40×20

Community / Worship Space

40×20 community / worship space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×20 rv / boat storage cost?

A 40×20 rv / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×20 rv / boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×20 rv / boat storage?

Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×20 rv / boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×20 rv / boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×20 rv / boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 40×20 rv / boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 40×20 rv / boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×20 rv / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×20 rv / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×20 rv / boat storage typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building service shop with red roof and three glass sectional doors

40×20 RV / Boat Storage

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

40×20 Home Gym / Studio

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

40×20 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $11,800

12

40×20 Home Gym / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,450$11,800SAVE $1,650
or $246/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings40×20Home Gym / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×20 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Private 800 sq ft gym, studio, training room, music space, or creative workshop. Add insulation, windows, HVAC-ready framing, and finished interior upgrades.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size40×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×20
40×20
this size
$11,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $8,995
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X20-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

40 feet wide × 20 feet long. Private 800 sq ft gym, studio, training room, music space, or creative workshop.

Cardio zoneWeight rackStretch / Bench40′ × 20′ · 800 sq ft · home-gym layout

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Add insulation, windows, HVAC-ready framing, and finished interior upgrades.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 40×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×20 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width40′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym / studio
Everyday home gym / studio
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym / studio + seasonal storage
home gym / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×20 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×20 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×20?

800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 20′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 40×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×20 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×20 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym / Studio also viewed:

🏡 40×20

Metal Garage

40×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage →

🏡 40×20

Workshop / Hobby Space

40×20 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 40×20

Metal Carport

40×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🏢 40×20

Commercial Steel Building

40×20 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 40×20

RV / Boat Storage

40×20 rv / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage →

🌾 40×20

Metal Barn

40×20 metal barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn →

🎯 40×20

Man Cave / She Shed

40×20 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏭 40×20

Factory / Warehouse

40×20 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 40×20

Government / Institutional

40×20 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 40×20

Equestrian / Tack Storage

40×20 equestrian / tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian / Tack Storage →

🏛️ 40×20

Community / Worship Space

40×20 community / worship space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 40×20 home gym / studio cost?

A 40×20 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×20 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×20 home gym / studio?

Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×20 home gym / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×20 home gym / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×20 home gym / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 40×20 home gym / studio.

What warranty comes with the 40×20 home gym / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×20 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×20 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

40×20 Home Gym / Studio

800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

40′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×20 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart